TOOLS
Rule Radar
Perps Prop Firm Rule Changes. Tracked Daily.
Your morning update on perps prop firm rule changes, refreshed overnight.
We track the published rules and policies of every perps prop firm on PickAPropFirm.com and keep every version, so when a firm edits a rule we have the before and after in writing. Most of what changes is really nothing: a fixed typo, a clarified sentence, a word added here and there. But real changes stand out fast, and you can literally watch rules and policies tighten line by line. Payout terms creep, consistency thresholds drop, and prices quietly climb. It works the other way too: sometimes payouts improve and rules loosen, and when that happens it’s usually one of our Premier firms.
Perps prop firms are new, and their rules move faster than the CME shops: leverage caps, funding and swap fees, payout rails and drawdown terms can all change between one week and the next. That is exactly why they are on this radar. If a plan looks too good to be true, it almost always is.
Starred changes are the ones we think deserve your attention; the full feed below is everything we caught, right down to the typo fixes.
Treat this page like your morning paper. It updates overnight, so grab your coffee and see what changed. – Jmu (@jmutrades)
See how these firms compare on Top Perp Props ›
Starred changes
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded NAS100 and SP500 to the list of instruments with boosted leverage on Elite accounts.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
PremierE8 Markets Perps · E8 Signature | E8 Markets Help Center5 is now 4.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Minimum profitable days between each payout: 5 (does not apply for first payout)
- A profitable day is considered as a day where the realized closed PnL equals to 0.3% or more.
- You have to achieve profitable days between each payout cycle. After requesting a payout, your previously achieved profitable days will reset to 0.
$75 - $25,000 account
$150 - $50,000 account
$300 - $100,000 account
$450 - $150,000 account
Payout buffer - Before you can start requesting payout, you need to leave a buffer in your account in the same size as your EOD Dynamic Drawdown. The buffer can not be requested. The reason for this is to protect trades from violating EOD by requesting full profit from the account.
If your EOD is 3% and your initial balance $100,000, the buffer is $3000.
Payout caps - Payout caps determine the maximum you can request in a single payout.
A full explanation can be seen in this article.
Maximum amount of payouts per account: 4 (only for the Futures market)
Section: Criteria for the payout:
− This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 5 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
Payout Mechanism:
On E8 Signature (futures market), for your current payout, only profit earned during the current cycle is eligible. Meaning Unused profits from previous cycles don't carry over.
Trading Hours And instruments
Please note that on E8 Signature accounts, all positions are closed by 23:00 Server time, and trading re-opens at 00:15 Server time.
Trading hours or available instruments can differ based on the Market you choose - Click here for more details.
News trading
You can trade news on E8 Signature without any restrictions (This includes SimFi™ challenge account (phase-1) and SimFI™ performance Account)
E8 Markets offers a simulated environment that is designed to replicate real-market data and trading conditions; just as slippage is a factor in a real market, it is also present within our simulated environment. Therefore, we recommend that users avoid trading during high-impact news releases.
More information can be accessed in the article here.
Copy trading rules
E8 Markets allows copy trading across all accounts, including SimFi™ challenge and SimFI™ Performance accounts or personal accounts, as long as these accounts belong to you.
What is the available leverage? (Classic Markets)
After
Minimum profitable days between each payout: 5 (does not apply for first payout)
- A profitable day is considered as a day where the realized closed PnL equals to 0.3% or more.
- You have to achieve profitable days between each payout cycle. After requesting a payout, your previously achieved profitable days will reset to 0.
$75 - $25,000 account
$150 - $50,000 account
$300 - $100,000 account
$450 - $150,000 account
Payout buffer - Before you can start requesting payout, you need to leave a buffer in your account in the same size as your EOD Dynamic Drawdown. The buffer can not be requested. The reason for this is to protect trades from violating EOD by requesting full profit from the account.
If your EOD is 3% and your initial balance $100,000, the buffer is $3000.
Payout caps - Payout caps determine the maximum you can request in a single payout.
A full explanation can be seen in this article.
Maximum amount of payouts per account: 4 (only for the Futures market)
Section: Criteria for the payout:
+ This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 4 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
Payout Mechanism:
On E8 Signature (futures market), for your current payout, only profit earned during the current cycle is eligible. Meaning Unused profits from previous cycles don't carry over.
Trading Hours And instruments
Please note that on E8 Signature accounts, all positions are closed by 23:00 Server time, and trading re-opens at 00:15 Server time.
Trading hours or available instruments can differ based on the Market you choose - Click here for more details.
News trading
You can trade news on E8 Signature without any restrictions (This includes SimFi™ challenge account (phase-1) and SimFI™ performance Account)
E8 Markets offers a simulated environment that is designed to replicate real-market data and trading conditions; just as slippage is a factor in a real market, it is also present within our simulated environment. Therefore, we recommend that users avoid trading during high-impact news releases.
More information can be accessed in the article here.
Copy trading rules
E8 Markets allows copy trading across all accounts, including SimFi™ challenge and SimFI™ Performance accounts or personal accounts, as long as these accounts belong to you.
What is the available leverage? (Classic Markets)
Minimum profitable days between each payout: 5 (does not apply for first payout)
- A profitable day is considered as a day where the realized closed PnL equals to 0.3% or more.
- You have to achieve profitable days between each payout cycle. After requesting a payout, your previously achieved profitable days will reset to 0.
$75 - $25,000 account
$150 - $50,000 account
$300 - $100,000 account
$450 - $150,000 account
Payout buffer - Before you can start requesting payout, you need to leave a buffer in your account in the same size as your EOD Dynamic Drawdown. The buffer can not be requested. The reason for this is to protect trades from violating EOD by requesting full profit from the account.
If your EOD is 3% and your initial balance $100,000, the buffer is $3000.
Payout caps - Payout caps determine the maximum you can request in a single payout.
A full explanation can be seen in this article.
Maximum amount of payouts per account: 4 (only for the Futures market)
Section: Criteria for the payout:
− This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 5 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
+ This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 4 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
Payout Mechanism:
On E8 Signature (futures market), for your current payout, only profit earned during the current cycle is eligible. Meaning Unused profits from previous cycles don't carry over.
Trading Hours And instruments
Please note that on E8 Signature accounts, all positions are closed by 23:00 Server time, and trading re-opens at 00:15 Server time.
Trading hours or available instruments can differ based on the Market you choose - Click here for more details.
News trading
You can trade news on E8 Signature without any restrictions (This includes SimFi™ challenge account (phase-1) and SimFI™ performance Account)
E8 Markets offers a simulated environment that is designed to replicate real-market data and trading conditions; just as slippage is a factor in a real market, it is also present within our simulated environment. Therefore, we recommend that users avoid trading during high-impact news releases.
More information can be accessed in the article here.
Copy trading rules
E8 Markets allows copy trading across all accounts, including SimFi™ challenge and SimFI™ Performance accounts or personal accounts, as long as these accounts belong to you.
What is the available leverage? (Classic Markets)
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APICompetition accounts cannot participate in copy groups; affected saved groups must be disabled.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.
Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.
After
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
+ Competition accounts cannot lead or follow in a copy group, because the
+ Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or out of them.
+ POST /v1/copy-trading rejects an enabled group that includes one. A group
+ saved before this rule does not copy lead orders to or from a competition
+ account; disable it with POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.
Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
+ Competition accounts cannot lead or follow in a copy group, because the
+ Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or out of them.
+ POST /v1/copy-trading rejects an enabled group that includes one. A group
+ saved before this rule does not copy lead orders to or from a competition
+ account; disable it with POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.
Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsOptional percent buttons added to One-Click Trading, accessible via gear icon in window.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
− Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
nothing.
Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
After
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
+ Flat on the trade page. Optional percent buttons are turned on from the
+ gear in the window itself; see
+ One-Click Trading. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
nothing.
Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
− Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
+ Flat on the trade page. Optional percent buttons are turned on from the
+ gear in the window itself; see
+ One-Click Trading. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
nothing.
Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading SettingsCompetition accounts cannot lead groups or follow either; multiplier calculation and Try An Order preview feature explained; competition rule added to validation rules.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Open Copy Trading settings
Group controls
Each group contains:
- one Lead Account that sends eligible trading instructions;
- one or more Follower Accounts;
- a multiplier from 0.1× to 2× for each follower;
- an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.
An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.
Lead Account
− Choose the account that should drive the group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.
Follower Accounts and Multipliers
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
Operation | Endpoint
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop
− Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, sizing, disjoint-group,
− and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in deleted_config_ids are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.
json theme={null}
{
"groups": [
{
"enabled": true,
"source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
"targets": [
{ "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
]
After
Open Copy Trading settings
Group controls
Each group contains:
- one Lead Account that sends eligible trading instructions;
- one or more Follower Accounts;
- a multiplier from 0.1× to 2× for each follower;
- an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.
An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.
Lead Account
+ Choose the account that should drive the group. Competition accounts cannot
+ lead a group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.
Follower Accounts and Multipliers
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
+ Competition accounts cannot follow either, because the Competition Rules
+ prohibit copying trades into or out of a competition account. Accounts that
+ cannot be selected show the reason under their name.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
+ Each follower row shows what it would open when the lead opens 1 BTC, and how
+ that quantity follows from the two account sizes and the multiplier. For
+ example, a \$100,000 follower of a \$50,000 lead copies 200% of the lead's
+ quantity at 1×, and 300% at 1.5×.
+ Try An Order
+ Once a group has followers, Try An Order shows how one lead order would
+ scale across the group. Nothing is placed. Drag the slider to set the lead
+ order size and choose 1× or 2× leverage. For each account, the preview
+ shows the order it would open, the margin that order needs, and a bar for the
+ account's balance. The filled part of the bar is the margin needed. An account
+ marked Would Reject cannot afford that order and would skip it while the
+ lead and other followers still fill. Lower its multiplier or use a smaller
+ order to copy it.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
Operation | Endpoint
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop
+ Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, competition, sizing,
+ disjoint-group, and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in deleted_config_ids are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.
json theme={null}
{
"groups": [
{
"enabled": true,
"source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
"targets": [
{ "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
]
Open Copy Trading settings
Group controls
Each group contains:
- one Lead Account that sends eligible trading instructions;
- one or more Follower Accounts;
- a multiplier from 0.1× to 2× for each follower;
- an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.
An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.
Lead Account
− Choose the account that should drive the group. Changing the lead of an existing
+ Choose the account that should drive the group. Competition accounts cannot
+ lead a group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.
Follower Accounts and Multipliers
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
+ Competition accounts cannot follow either, because the Competition Rules
+ prohibit copying trades into or out of a competition account. Accounts that
+ cannot be selected show the reason under their name.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
+ Each follower row shows what it would open when the lead opens 1 BTC, and how
+ that quantity follows from the two account sizes and the multiplier. For
+ example, a \$100,000 follower of a \$50,000 lead copies 200% of the lead's
+ quantity at 1×, and 300% at 1.5×.
+ Try An Order
+ Once a group has followers, Try An Order shows how one lead order would
+ scale across the group. Nothing is placed. Drag the slider to set the lead
+ order size and choose 1× or 2× leverage. For each account, the preview
+ shows the order it would open, the margin that order needs, and a bar for the
+ account's balance. The filled part of the bar is the margin needed. An account
+ marked Would Reject cannot afford that order and would skip it while the
+ lead and other followers still fill. Lower its multiplier or use a smaller
+ order to copy it.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
Operation | Endpoint
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop
− Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, sizing, disjoint-group,
− and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
+ Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, competition, sizing,
+ disjoint-group, and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in deleted_config_ids are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.
json theme={null}
{
"groups": [
{
"enabled": true,
"source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
"targets": [
{ "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
]
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle added details about One-Click Trading window resizing, percent buttons, and their configuration options; changed "and Flat" to "percent, and Flat" in summary.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
− size are remembered in that browser.
- On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
− between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.
Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
Choose an order type
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
line without the close dialog;
- Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
Reverse Position button and its review;
- One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
− and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
After
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
+ size are remembered in that browser. Sell and Buy grow with the
+ window, so a larger window gives you larger buttons.
- On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
+ between them, and Flat below. You can also turn on percent buttons from the
+ gear in the window's header.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ - When turned on, the percent buttons under Sell open a short and the ones under Buy
+ open a long, sized as a share of your available margin at your saved
+ leverage. 100% uses all of your available margin.
+ - The Close percent buttons close that share of your position in the
+ market at market. Unlike Flat, they leave your open orders in place.
+ They are available only while you have a position in that market.
+ Percent buttons are off by default. Select the gear in the window's header and
+ turn on Show Percent Buttons to add them, then choose the three open
+ percentages and the three close percentages. Changes apply as you type and are
+ saved to your account, so they follow you to every device.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.
Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
Choose an order type
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
line without the close dialog;
- Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
Reverse Position button and its review;
- One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
+ percent, and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
− size are remembered in that browser.
+ size are remembered in that browser. Sell and Buy grow with the
+ window, so a larger window gives you larger buttons.
- On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
− between them, and Flat below.
+ between them, and Flat below. You can also turn on percent buttons from the
+ gear in the window's header.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ - When turned on, the percent buttons under Sell open a short and the ones under Buy
+ open a long, sized as a share of your available margin at your saved
+ leverage. 100% uses all of your available margin.
+ - The Close percent buttons close that share of your position in the
+ market at market. Unlike Flat, they leave your open orders in place.
+ They are available only while you have a position in that market.
+ Percent buttons are off by default. Select the gear in the window's header and
+ turn on Show Percent Buttons to add them, then choose the three open
+ percentages and the three close percentages. Changes apply as you type and are
+ saved to your account, so they follow you to every device.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.
Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
Choose an order type
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
line without the close dialog;
- Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
Reverse Position button and its review;
- One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
− and Flat window with no review step;
+ percent, and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded condition that a funded account failing or closing during evaluation triggers automatic funding if limits are met.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
− limits. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10
When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand | On demand
Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit | All profit
Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250 | \$500
Minimum you receive | \$40 (\$45 on 90/10) | \$80 (\$90 on 90/10) | \$200 (\$225 on 90/10) | \$400 (\$450 on 90/10)
These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
After
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
+ limits. If a funded account fails or closes while the evaluation waits and it
+ then fits within both limits, it is funded automatically. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10
When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand | On demand
Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit | All profit
Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250 | \$500
Minimum you receive | \$40 (\$45 on 90/10) | \$80 (\$90 on 90/10) | \$200 (\$225 on 90/10) | \$400 (\$450 on 90/10)
These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
− limits. See Becoming Funded.
+ limits. If a funded account fails or closes while the evaluation waits and it
+ then fits within both limits, it is funded automatically. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10
When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand | On demand
Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit | All profit
Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250 | \$500
Minimum you receive | \$40 (\$45 on 90/10) | \$80 (\$90 on 90/10) | \$200 (\$225 on 90/10) | \$400 (\$450 on 90/10)
These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading GuideArticle now prohibits competition accounts from leading or following in copy trading groups, and adds an example table showing how multipliers affect follower position sizing.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
− but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
After
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
+ but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead. Competition accounts
+ cannot lead or follow: the Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or
+ out of a competition account. A group saved before this rule no longer copies
+ to or from a competition account, and you can still disable it.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
+ For example, with a \$50,000 lead:
+ Follower | Multiplier | Lead opens 1 BTC | Follower opens
+ \$50,000 | 1× | 1 BTC | 1 BTC
+ \$100,000 | 1× | 1 BTC | 2 BTC
+ \$100,000 | 1.5× | 1 BTC | 3 BTC
+ \$25,000 | 0.5× | 1 BTC | 0.25 BTC
+ At 1×, every follower uses the same share of its balance as the lead. Use
+ Try An Order in Copy Trading settings to see the margin each account would
+ need for a lead order and which followers would reject it.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
− but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
+ but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead. Competition accounts
+ cannot lead or follow: the Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or
+ out of a competition account. A group saved before this rule no longer copies
+ to or from a competition account, and you can still disable it.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
+ For example, with a \$50,000 lead:
+ Follower | Multiplier | Lead opens 1 BTC | Follower opens
+ \$50,000 | 1× | 1 BTC | 1 BTC
+ \$100,000 | 1× | 1 BTC | 2 BTC
+ \$100,000 | 1.5× | 1 BTC | 3 BTC
+ \$25,000 | 0.5× | 1 BTC | 0.25 BTC
+ At 1×, every follower uses the same share of its balance as the lead. Use
+ Try An Order in Copy Trading settings to see the margin each account would
+ need for a lead order and which followers would reject it.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesAdded rule: funded accounts failing or closing allow waiting accounts within limits to receive automatic funding.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
− completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
After
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
+ completion instead of receiving automatic funding. If a funded account later
+ fails or closes and the waiting account then fits within both limits, it is
+ funded automatically.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
− completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
+ completion instead of receiving automatic funding. If a funded account later
+ fails or closes and the waiting account then fits within both limits, it is
+ funded automatically.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
PremierMyFundedPerps · Becoming FundedAdded description of automatic funding when an active account fails or closes, and funding order for multiple waiting applications.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.
3. Follow any funding review
Some passed accounts can enter Funding Review In Progress after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.
Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.
4. Open the funded account
When funding is approved, choose Go to Funded Account or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is Funded
and its status is Active before trading.
The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.
A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
After
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.
+ If one of your active funded accounts fails or is closed while the application
+ waits, and the waiting account now fits within both limits, it is funded
+ automatically. You do not need to contact support. When several applications
+ are waiting, the one you signed first is funded first.
3. Follow any funding review
Some passed accounts can enter Funding Review In Progress after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.
Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.
4. Open the funded account
When funding is approved, choose Go to Funded Account or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is Funded
and its status is Active before trading.
The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.
A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.
+ If one of your active funded accounts fails or is closed while the application
+ waits, and the waiting account now fits within both limits, it is funded
+ automatically. You do not need to contact support. When several applications
+ are waiting, the one you signed first is funded first.
3. Follow any funding review
Some passed accounts can enter Funding Review In Progress after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.
Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.
4. Open the funded account
When funding is approved, choose Go to Funded Account or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is Funded
and its status is Active before trading.
The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.
A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramCommission History now shows full Order ID instead of redacted version; first-purchase offer increased from 25% off to up to 30% off.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
until the review is complete.
- Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
off or back on under
Notification settings.
− - Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
− an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
− distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
FP Points
Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
Ways to Earn on Rewards. These
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
− purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
− of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
− shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
− matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
− Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
− Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
without codes do not see this tab.
After
until the review is complete.
- Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
off or back on under
Notification settings.
+ - Commission History shows the full Order ID beneath each product.
+ It is the same order number (starting with FP-) that appears on the
+ buyer's invoice and receipt, so you can match orders to invoices and
+ reference a purchase when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
FP Points
Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
Ways to Earn on Rewards. These
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - Advertised offer. Every graphic invites buyers to use your code for up
+ to 30% off, the rate for an eligible first purchase. This rate is part of
+ the artwork and does not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code gives
+ 30% off an eligible first purchase. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ and an Up to 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions
+ of Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes,
+ and Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
without codes do not see this tab.
until the review is complete.
- Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
off or back on under
Notification settings.
− - Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
− an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
− distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
+ - Commission History shows the full Order ID beneath each product.
+ It is the same order number (starting with FP-) that appears on the
+ buyer's invoice and receipt, so you can match orders to invoices and
+ reference a purchase when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
FP Points
Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
Ways to Earn on Rewards. These
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
− purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
− of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
− shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
− matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
+ - Advertised offer. Every graphic invites buyers to use your code for up
+ to 30% off, the rate for an eligible first purchase. This rate is part of
+ the artwork and does not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code gives
+ 30% off an eligible first purchase. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
− Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
− Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
+ and an Up to 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions
+ of Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes,
+ and Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
without codes do not see this tab.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Update TP/SL attached to a resting limit entryPage removed from the help center.Oct 18
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIStop_market and stop_limit orders now support attached take-profit/stop-loss; attached-exits endpoint extended to stop_market and stop_limit entries.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
type | Required price fields | Important options
market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL
limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force
chase | chase_offset | optional chase_cap_price
− stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection
− stop_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order
take_market | trigger_price | opening conditional order
take_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order
take_profit | trigger_price, reduce_only: true | position protection
conditional | trigger_price, trigger_market_id, trigger_direction | observe one market and execute on another
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.
copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
− a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders with an Idempotency-Key.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A 202
response includes progress and Retry-After; repeat the same request until the
operation reports completed.
Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.
After
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
type | Required price fields | Important options
market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL
limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force
chase | chase_offset | optional chase_cap_price
+ stop_market | trigger_price | attached TP/SL, or reduce-only protection
+ stop_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order, attached TP/SL
take_market | trigger_price | opening conditional order
take_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order
take_profit | trigger_price, reduce_only: true | position protection
conditional | trigger_price, trigger_market_id, trigger_direction | observe one market and execute on another
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.
copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
+ a resting limit, stop_market, or stop_limit entry. Send null to remove
+ a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders with an Idempotency-Key.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A 202
response includes progress and Retry-After; repeat the same request until the
operation reports completed.
Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
type | Required price fields | Important options
market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL
limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force
chase | chase_offset | optional chase_cap_price
− stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection
− stop_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order
+ stop_market | trigger_price | attached TP/SL, or reduce-only protection
+ stop_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order, attached TP/SL
take_market | trigger_price | opening conditional order
take_limit | trigger_price, limit_price | opening conditional order
take_profit | trigger_price, reduce_only: true | position protection
conditional | trigger_price, trigger_market_id, trigger_direction | observe one market and execute on another
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.
copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
− a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
+ a resting limit, stop_market, or stop_limit entry. Send null to remove
+ a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders with an Idempotency-Key.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A 202
response includes progress and Retry-After; repeat the same request until the
operation reports completed.
Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideFixed Range Volume Profile drawing added with developing POC and value-area tracking; Take Profit and Stop Loss attachment rules added for multiple order types.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
To build your own indicators, see Custom Scripts.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.
While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
Venue | Trigger source
Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid (including forex) | Last traded price
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
After
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
To build your own indicators, see Custom Scripts.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
+ A new Fixed Range Volume Profile drawing shows its developing point of
+ control (POC) and developing value area as step lines across the range. The
+ upper and lower value-area lines track the value area high (VAH) and value
+ area low (VAL) bar by bar. At the end of the range they match the final VAH
+ and VAL for the whole range. Past the end of the range, the lines continue
+ flat at those final levels: candles after the range are not counted. To hide
+ either line, open the drawing's settings and turn off Developing Poc or
+ Developing VA on the Style tab. Change the share of volume the value
+ area covers with Value Area Volume on the Inputs tab. Profiles you drew
+ before this change keep their own settings.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.
+ You can attach a Take Profit and Stop Loss to market, limit, Stop Market, and
+ Stop Limit entries. On a limit or stop entry, the TP/SL waits with the order and
+ is placed only when the entry fills, so it cannot trigger before you have a
+ position. A TP/SL on a Stop Market entry is checked against its trigger price,
+ and on a Stop Limit entry against its limit price. If the entry fills at a price
+ that would put the Take Profit or Stop Loss on the wrong side of your entry, the
+ order is rejected instead of opening an unprotected position. You can change or
+ remove a waiting TP/SL from Open Orders until the entry fills. Take Market,
+ Take Limit, and reduce-only orders cannot carry a TP/SL.
While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
Venue | Trigger source
Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid (including forex) | Last traded price
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
To build your own indicators, see Custom Scripts.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
+ A new Fixed Range Volume Profile drawing shows its developing point of
+ control (POC) and developing value area as step lines across the range. The
+ upper and lower value-area lines track the value area high (VAH) and value
+ area low (VAL) bar by bar. At the end of the range they match the final VAH
+ and VAL for the whole range. Past the end of the range, the lines continue
+ flat at those final levels: candles after the range are not counted. To hide
+ either line, open the drawing's settings and turn off Developing Poc or
+ Developing VA on the Style tab. Change the share of volume the value
+ area covers with Value Area Volume on the Inputs tab. Profiles you drew
+ before this change keep their own settings.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.
+ You can attach a Take Profit and Stop Loss to market, limit, Stop Market, and
+ Stop Limit entries. On a limit or stop entry, the TP/SL waits with the order and
+ is placed only when the entry fills, so it cannot trigger before you have a
+ position. A TP/SL on a Stop Market entry is checked against its trigger price,
+ and on a Stop Limit entry against its limit price. If the entry fills at a price
+ that would put the Take Profit or Stop Loss on the wrong side of your entry, the
+ order is rejected instead of opening an unprotected position. You can change or
+ remove a waiting TP/SL from Open Orders until the entry fills. Take Market,
+ Take Limit, and reduce-only orders cannot carry a TP/SL.
While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
Venue | Trigger source
Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid (including forex) | Last traded price
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded clarification that 3% DLL accounts maintain their daily loss floor after withdrawals, with reference to related documentation.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
After
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
+ On a 3% DLL account, a withdrawal also never lowers the daily loss floor below
+ where it started that day. See
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
+ On a 3% DLL account, a withdrawal also never lowers the daily loss floor below
+ where it started that day. See
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsAdded section explaining how withdrawals interact with daily loss limits, including example calculation.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite requests show the gross deduction and Balance After Payout only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.
A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.
Split cash and store credit
Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit. On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows Paid as Store Credit in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
Store credit only. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
After
Elite requests show the gross deduction and Balance After Payout only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.
A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal
+ A withdrawal never counts as a daily loss. On plans with a daily loss limit,
+ a payout first uses up any profit you made earlier in the same trading day.
+ That withdrawn profit no longer adds room under the daily loss limit, so the
+ daily loss floor never drops below where it started that day.
+ For example, a \$5K account with a 3% daily loss limit (\$150) starts the day
+ at \$5,000, so its daily loss floor is \$4,850. It gains \$280, then withdraws
+ \$280 gross. The balance returns to \$5,000 and the daily loss floor stays at
+ \$4,850. If the withdrawal is larger than the day's profit, the floor moves
+ down only by the extra amount, so the withdrawal still does not count as a
+ loss.
Split cash and store credit
Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit. On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows Paid as Store Credit in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
Store credit only. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
Elite requests show the gross deduction and Balance After Payout only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.
A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal
+ A withdrawal never counts as a daily loss. On plans with a daily loss limit,
+ a payout first uses up any profit you made earlier in the same trading day.
+ That withdrawn profit no longer adds room under the daily loss limit, so the
+ daily loss floor never drops below where it started that day.
+ For example, a \$5K account with a 3% daily loss limit (\$150) starts the day
+ at \$5,000, so its daily loss floor is \$4,850. It gains \$280, then withdraws
+ \$280 gross. The balance returns to \$5,000 and the daily loss floor stays at
+ \$4,850. If the withdrawal is larger than the day's profit, the floor moves
+ down only by the extra amount, so the withdrawal still does not count as a
+ loss.
Split cash and store credit
Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit. On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows Paid as Store Credit in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
Store credit only. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
PremierMyFundedPerps · Update TP/SL attached to a resting limit or stop entryNew page published.Oct 18
PremierMyFundedPerps · API capabilitiesEntry protection now includes stop-market and stop-limit orders in addition to market and limit orders.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities
Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.
The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.
Trading coverage
The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.
Capability | Public API support
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC.
− Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
After
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities
Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.
The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.
Trading coverage
The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.
Capability | Public API support
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC.
+ Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit, stop-market, and stop-limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities
Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.
The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.
Trading coverage
The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.
Capability | Public API support
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC.
− Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries.
+ Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit, stop-market, and stop-limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuidePhone window interaction changed: drag header to move within chart, tap handle to switch edges instead of dragging to move between edges.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
size are remembered in that browser.
− - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
− over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
− to the other edge.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
After
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
size are remembered in that browser.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
+ header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
+ that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
size are remembered in that browser.
− - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
− over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
− to the other edge.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
+ header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
+ that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
PremierMyFundedPerps · CompetitionsAccount bans now include both full account bans and competition-specific bans as grounds for disqualification and prize forfeiture.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows Complete Account Details instead of Join Competition until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.
Disqualification
Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.
When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:
- Open orders are cancelled.
- Open positions are closed at the market price.
- Your other accounts are not affected.
If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.
If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.
− If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, your active competition entries are
− disqualified and their competition accounts are closed. A winner whose account
− is banned when results are finalized does not receive a prize.
Provisional and final results
A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them Provisional Standings until results are final, then Final Standings. Prizes follow the final standings.
A prize shown as To be determined has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.
For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see Launch competition. For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see October competition.
After
On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows Complete Account Details instead of Join Competition until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.
Disqualification
Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.
When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:
- Open orders are cancelled.
- Open positions are closed at the market price.
- Your other accounts are not affected.
If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.
If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.
+ If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, or banned from competitions, your
+ active competition entries are disqualified and their competition accounts are
+ closed. A winner whose account is banned, or banned from competitions, when
+ results are finalized does not receive a prize.
Provisional and final results
A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them Provisional Standings until results are final, then Final Standings. Prizes follow the final standings.
A prize shown as To be determined has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.
For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see Launch competition. For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see October competition.
On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows Complete Account Details instead of Join Competition until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.
Disqualification
Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.
When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:
- Open orders are cancelled.
- Open positions are closed at the market price.
- Your other accounts are not affected.
If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.
If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.
− If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, your active competition entries are
− disqualified and their competition accounts are closed. A winner whose account
− is banned when results are finalized does not receive a prize.
+ If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, or banned from competitions, your
+ active competition entries are disqualified and their competition accounts are
+ closed. A winner whose account is banned, or banned from competitions, when
+ results are finalized does not receive a prize.
Provisional and final results
A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them Provisional Standings until results are final, then Final Standings. Prizes follow the final standings.
A prize shown as To be determined has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.
For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see Launch competition. For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see October competition.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsInstagram option added to Share to Claim task interface, and new section added describing My Runs display and status indicators.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
from those accounts do.
− For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
− dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
Net payout | X case | Instagram story case
Up to \$250 | Bronze | Silver
\$250.01 to \$500 | Silver | Gold
\$500.01 to \$1,000 | Gold | Diamond
\$1,000.01 to \$2,500 | Diamond | Obsidian
\$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 | Obsidian | Eclipse
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Pictionary
A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.
Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
After
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
from those accounts do.
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram, either from the payout's
+ task in Share to Claim or in the payout certificate dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
Net payout | X case | Instagram story case
Up to \$250 | Bronze | Silver
\$250.01 to \$500 | Silver | Gold
\$500.01 to \$1,000 | Gold | Diamond
\$1,000.01 to \$2,500 | Diamond | Obsidian
\$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 | Obsidian | Eclipse
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Select My Runs at the top of the page to see every run you have started in
+ that drop, newest first. Each finished run shows its market, PnL, number of
+ trades, and the date and time of the chart you traded, and your best run is
+ marked Best. A run that is still playing shows In Progress, a run that
+ never finished shows Not Finished, and a run whose chart could not load
+ shows Chart Unavailable. Older runs load when you select Load More.
Pictionary
A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.
Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
from those accounts do.
− For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
− dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram, either from the payout's
+ task in Share to Claim or in the payout certificate dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
Net payout | X case | Instagram story case
Up to \$250 | Bronze | Silver
\$250.01 to \$500 | Silver | Gold
\$500.01 to \$1,000 | Gold | Diamond
\$1,000.01 to \$2,500 | Diamond | Obsidian
\$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 | Obsidian | Eclipse
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Select My Runs at the top of the page to see every run you have started in
+ that drop, newest first. Each finished run shows its market, PnL, number of
+ trades, and the date and time of the chart you traded, and your best run is
+ marked Best. A run that is still playing shows In Progress, a run that
+ never finished shows Not Finished, and a run whose chart could not load
+ shows Chart Unavailable. Older runs load when you select Load More.
Pictionary
A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.
Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramValues changed: 30% to 25%, 25% to 20%, 30% to 25%.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
− purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
After
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
− purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
+ and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideAdded section on comparing account P&L in activity panel; changed example timeframes from "2 hours, 6 hours" to "2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours".Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
Markets with two trading-hour options.
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
Markets | Venue
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.
Chart preferences and templates
The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily and weekly candles. The exact list
− depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine. Star a timeframe in the
menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on the timeframe you used
last.
The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.
Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
+ Compare account P\&L
+ Open Accounts in the trade page's activity panel to compare accounts
+ without switching dashboards. Today's P\&L shows each account's equity
+ change since midnight New York time, including unrealized gains and losses.
+ It updates as balances and position prices change and appears on both desktop
+ rows and mobile account cards. You can sort the desktop column or hide it
+ through Columns.
+ A dash means today's baseline is unavailable. Accounts with no open positions
+ and no activity since the daily reset show zero.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
Markets with two trading-hour options.
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
Markets | Venue
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.
Chart preferences and templates
The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily and weekly candles. The exact list
+ depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, 3 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine. Star a timeframe in the
menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on the timeframe you used
last.
The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.
Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
+ Compare account P\&L
+ Open Accounts in the trade page's activity panel to compare accounts
+ without switching dashboards. Today's P\&L shows each account's equity
+ change since midnight New York time, including unrealized gains and losses.
+ It updates as balances and position prices change and appears on both desktop
+ rows and mobile account cards. You can sort the desktop column or hide it
+ through Columns.
+ A dash means today's baseline is unavailable. Accounts with no open positions
+ and no activity since the daily reset show zero.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
Markets with two trading-hour options.
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
Markets | Venue
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.
Chart preferences and templates
The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily and weekly candles. The exact list
− depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, and 6 hours are
+ depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, 3 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine. Star a timeframe in the
menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on the timeframe you used
last.
The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.
Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsArticle now states every request requires review and approval, and clarifies that request availability doesn't guarantee immediate payment.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
− eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
− request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
After
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
+ eligibility gates are clear. Every request is subject to review and approval.
+ Daily or on-demand request availability does not guarantee immediate payment;
+ review and delivery can take longer than the request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
− eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
− request window.
+ eligibility gates are clear. Every request is subject to review and approval.
+ Daily or on-demand request availability does not guarantee immediate payment;
+ review and delivery can take longer than the request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
PremierMyFundedPerps · Account trading policyAdded explanation of automatic position closure 15 minutes before weekend market close with associated order rejections and cancellations.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
see Retiring markets.
EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
After
see Retiring markets.
EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
+ From 15 minutes before a session market's scheduled weekend close until it
+ reopens, every open position on it is closed automatically and an order that
+ would open, add to, or flip a position is rejected with weekend_closure.
+ Resting entry orders on the market are canceled with cancel reason
+ venue_policy, and the closed positions report close reason system. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
see Retiring markets.
EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
+ From 15 minutes before a session market's scheduled weekend close until it
+ reopens, every open position on it is closed automatically and an order that
+ would open, add to, or flip a position is rejected with weekend_closure.
+ Resting entry orders on the market are canceled with cancel reason
+ venue_policy, and the closed positions report close reason system. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
PremierMyFundedPerps · Troubleshooting and FAQAdded section explaining that forex and index positions close automatically 15 minutes before weekend market close, with warning notification.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
Update Available prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows Something Went Wrong,
include its error reference when contacting support.
After
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
+ Can I hold forex and index positions over the weekend?
+ No. All open positions on markets that follow trading hours (the forex and
+ index markets marked 24/5 or 23/5) close automatically 15 minutes
+ before the market's scheduled weekend close. A warning on the trade page shows
+ the upcoming auto-close time during the final hour. New positions cannot be
+ opened on those markets after the auto-close time until the market reopens.
+ Auto-closed positions show Weekend Auto-Close in your trade history. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
Update Available prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows Something Went Wrong,
include its error reference when contacting support.
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
+ Can I hold forex and index positions over the weekend?
+ No. All open positions on markets that follow trading hours (the forex and
+ index markets marked 24/5 or 23/5) close automatically 15 minutes
+ before the market's scheduled weekend close. A warning on the trade page shows
+ the upcoming auto-close time during the final hour. New positions cannot be
+ opened on those markets after the auto-close time until the market reopens.
+ Auto-closed positions show Weekend Auto-Close in your trade history. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
Update Available prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows Something Went Wrong,
include its error reference when contacting support.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle adds weekend auto-close requirement for certain markets with new section explaining timing, mechanics, and effects on orders and positions.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.
- Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
- 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
market.
The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
− - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
− account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
− positions close at that last quote.
− Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
After
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.
- Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
+ Positions on this option close automatically before the weekend; see
+ Weekend auto-close.
- 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
market.
The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote during a
+ daily break or holiday closure. If your account is liquidated or closed out
+ while a market is closed, those positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a daily break or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
+ Weekend auto-close
+ You cannot hold positions on these markets over the weekend. Every open
+ position on them closes automatically 15 minutes before the market's scheduled
+ weekend close. This applies to every account type, in both the evaluation and
+ funded stages, and it happens whether or not you are online.
+ - When it happens: 15 minutes before the Friday close in the
+ Trading hours table. The time follows New York time, so it
+ moves with daylight saving time. For example, a market that closes at
+ Friday 17:00 New York time closes its positions at 16:45.
+ - Warning: during the final hour before the auto-close, the trade page
+ shows the exact auto-close time in your time zone with a countdown, and the
+ market status above the chart counts down to it.
+ - How positions close: at the market price at that moment, with the normal
+ trading fee. Realized profit or loss is applied to your balance, and the
+ account's rules are checked against the result, the same as for a close you
+ make yourself.
+ - Open orders: limit and stop entry orders on the market are canceled.
+ Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled when their position closes.
+ - New positions: from the auto-close time until the market reopens on
+ Sunday, you cannot open or add to a position on the market. Orders that only
+ reduce a position are still accepted. Trading resumes at the next scheduled
+ opening.
+ - Trade history: a closed position shows the reason Weekend Auto-Close,
+ with its exit price and realized profit or loss. Its closing fill appears in
+ order history as a System Close.
+ The 24/7 option of a market with two trading-hour options is not affected.
+ Daily breaks and holiday closures do not close positions.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.
- Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
+ Positions on this option close automatically before the weekend; see
+ Weekend auto-close.
- 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
market.
The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
− - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
− account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
− positions close at that last quote.
− Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote during a
+ daily break or holiday closure. If your account is liquidated or closed out
+ while a market is closed, those positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a daily break or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
+ Weekend auto-close
+ You cannot hold positions on these markets over the weekend. Every open
+ position on them closes automatically 15 minutes before the market's scheduled
+ weekend close. This applies to every account type, in both the evaluation and
+ funded stages, and it happens whether or not you are online.
+ - When it happens: 15 minutes before the Friday close in the
+ Trading hours table. The time follows New York time, so it
+ moves with daylight saving time. For example, a market that closes at
+ Friday 17:00 New York time closes its positions at 16:45.
+ - Warning: during the final hour before the auto-close, the trade page
+ shows the exact auto-close time in your time zone with a countdown, and the
+ market status above the chart counts down to it.
+ - How positions close: at the market price at that moment, with the normal
+ trading fee. Realized profit or loss is applied to your balance, and the
+ account's rules are checked against the result, the same as for a close you
+ make yourself.
+ - Open orders: limit and stop entry orders on the market are canceled.
+ Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled when their position closes.
+ - New positions: from the auto-close time until the market reopens on
+ Sunday, you cannot open or add to a position on the market. Orders that only
+ reduce a position are still accepted. Trading resumes at the next scheduled
+ opening.
+ - Trade history: a closed position shows the reason Weekend Auto-Close,
+ with its exit price and realized profit or loss. Its closing fill appears in
+ order history as a System Close.
+ The 24/7 option of a market with two trading-hour options is not affected.
+ Daily breaks and holiday closures do not close positions.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Tradable AssetsTotal tradable markets decreased from 134 to 122; crypto markets decreased from 68 to 66, stocks from 41 to 31.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
− This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
− List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
− 68 markets.
Market | Symbol
1000BONK-USD | 1000BONK
1000PEPE-USD | 1000PEPE
1000SHIB-USD | 1000SHIB
AAVE-USD | AAVE
ADA-USD | ADA
AERO-USD | AERO
ALGO-USD | ALGO
APT-USD | APT
ARB-USD | ARB
ASTER-USD | ASTER
ATOM-USD | ATOM
ETHFI-USD | ETHFI
FARTCOIN-USD | FARTCOIN
FET-USD | FET
FIL-USD | FIL
GRAM-USD | GRAM
GRASS-USD | GRASS
HBAR-USD | HBAR
HYPE-USD | HYPE
ICP-USD | ICP
INJ-USD | INJ
JTO-USD | JTO
JUP-USD | JUP
− KAITO-USD | KAITO
LDO-USD | LDO
LINK-USD | LINK
LIT-USD | LIT
LTC-USD | LTC
MON-USD | MON
NEAR-USD | NEAR
ONDO-USD | ONDO
OP-USD | OP
PENDLE-USD | PENDLE
PENGU-USD | PENGU
POL-USD | POL
− PONS-USD | PONS
PUMP-USD | PUMP
PYTH-USD | PYTH
RENDER-USD | RENDER
SEI-USD | SEI
SOL-USD | SOL
SPX-USD | SPX
SUI-USD | SUI
TAO-USD | TAO
TRUMP-USD | TRUMP
TRX-USD | TRX
UNI-USD | UNI
VVV-USD | VVV
WIF-USD | WIF
WLD-USD | WLD
WLFI-USD | WLFI
XLM-USD | XLM
XMR-USD | XMR
XPL-USD | XPL
XRP-USD | XRP
ZEC-USD | ZEC
Stocks
− 41 markets.
Market | Symbol
AAPL-USD | AAPL
AMD-USD | AMD
AMZN-USD | AMZN
ANTHROPIC-USD | ANTHROPIC
− ARM-USD | ARM
AVGO-USD | AVGO
BABA-USD | BABA
− BE-USD | BE
BMNR-USD | BMNR
− COHR-USD | COHR
COIN-USD | COIN
CRCL-USD | CRCL
CRWV-USD | CRWV
− CXMT-USD | CXMT
− DELL-USD | DELL
DRAM-USD | DRAM
GOOGL-USD | GOOGL
HOOD-USD | HOOD
INTC-USD | INTC
− LLY-USD | LLY
META-USD | META
MRVL-USD | MRVL
MSFT-USD | MSFT
MSTR-USD | MSTR
MU-USD | MU
NBIS-USD | NBIS
NVDA-USD | NVDA
OPENAI-USD | OPENAI
ORCL-USD | ORCL
PLTR-USD | PLTR
− QCOM-USD | QCOM
− RKLB-USD | RKLB
SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG
− SKHX-USD | SKHX
SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX
− SMSN-USD | SMSN
SNDK-USD | SNDK
SPCX-USD | SPCX
TSLA-USD | TSLA
TSM-USD | TSM
WDC-USD | WDC
Indices
7 markets.
Market | Symbol
EWY-USD | EWY
JP225-USD | JP225
NAS100-USD | NAS100
QQQ-USD | QQQ
After
Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
+ This page lists all 122 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
+ List last changed: 2026-10-16.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
+ 66 markets.
Market | Symbol
1000BONK-USD | 1000BONK
1000PEPE-USD | 1000PEPE
1000SHIB-USD | 1000SHIB
AAVE-USD | AAVE
ADA-USD | ADA
AERO-USD | AERO
ALGO-USD | ALGO
APT-USD | APT
ARB-USD | ARB
ASTER-USD | ASTER
ATOM-USD | ATOM
ETHFI-USD | ETHFI
FARTCOIN-USD | FARTCOIN
FET-USD | FET
FIL-USD | FIL
GRAM-USD | GRAM
GRASS-USD | GRASS
HBAR-USD | HBAR
HYPE-USD | HYPE
ICP-USD | ICP
INJ-USD | INJ
JTO-USD | JTO
JUP-USD | JUP
LDO-USD | LDO
LINK-USD | LINK
LIT-USD | LIT
LTC-USD | LTC
MON-USD | MON
NEAR-USD | NEAR
ONDO-USD | ONDO
OP-USD | OP
PENDLE-USD | PENDLE
PENGU-USD | PENGU
POL-USD | POL
PUMP-USD | PUMP
PYTH-USD | PYTH
RENDER-USD | RENDER
SEI-USD | SEI
SOL-USD | SOL
SPX-USD | SPX
SUI-USD | SUI
TAO-USD | TAO
TRUMP-USD | TRUMP
TRX-USD | TRX
UNI-USD | UNI
VVV-USD | VVV
WIF-USD | WIF
WLD-USD | WLD
WLFI-USD | WLFI
XLM-USD | XLM
XMR-USD | XMR
XPL-USD | XPL
XRP-USD | XRP
ZEC-USD | ZEC
Stocks
+ 31 markets.
Market | Symbol
AAPL-USD | AAPL
AMD-USD | AMD
AMZN-USD | AMZN
ANTHROPIC-USD | ANTHROPIC
AVGO-USD | AVGO
BABA-USD | BABA
BMNR-USD | BMNR
COIN-USD | COIN
CRCL-USD | CRCL
CRWV-USD | CRWV
DRAM-USD | DRAM
GOOGL-USD | GOOGL
HOOD-USD | HOOD
INTC-USD | INTC
META-USD | META
MRVL-USD | MRVL
MSFT-USD | MSFT
MSTR-USD | MSTR
MU-USD | MU
NBIS-USD | NBIS
NVDA-USD | NVDA
OPENAI-USD | OPENAI
ORCL-USD | ORCL
PLTR-USD | PLTR
SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG
SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX
SNDK-USD | SNDK
SPCX-USD | SPCX
TSLA-USD | TSLA
TSM-USD | TSM
WDC-USD | WDC
Indices
7 markets.
Market | Symbol
EWY-USD | EWY
JP225-USD | JP225
NAS100-USD | NAS100
QQQ-USD | QQQ
Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
− This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
− List last changed: 2026-10-12.
+ This page lists all 122 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
+ List last changed: 2026-10-16.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
− 68 markets.
+ 66 markets.
Market | Symbol
1000BONK-USD | 1000BONK
1000PEPE-USD | 1000PEPE
1000SHIB-USD | 1000SHIB
AAVE-USD | AAVE
ADA-USD | ADA
AERO-USD | AERO
ALGO-USD | ALGO
APT-USD | APT
ARB-USD | ARB
ASTER-USD | ASTER
ATOM-USD | ATOM
ETHFI-USD | ETHFI
FARTCOIN-USD | FARTCOIN
FET-USD | FET
FIL-USD | FIL
GRAM-USD | GRAM
GRASS-USD | GRASS
HBAR-USD | HBAR
HYPE-USD | HYPE
ICP-USD | ICP
INJ-USD | INJ
JTO-USD | JTO
JUP-USD | JUP
− KAITO-USD | KAITO
LDO-USD | LDO
LINK-USD | LINK
LIT-USD | LIT
LTC-USD | LTC
MON-USD | MON
NEAR-USD | NEAR
ONDO-USD | ONDO
OP-USD | OP
PENDLE-USD | PENDLE
PENGU-USD | PENGU
POL-USD | POL
− PONS-USD | PONS
PUMP-USD | PUMP
PYTH-USD | PYTH
RENDER-USD | RENDER
SEI-USD | SEI
SOL-USD | SOL
SPX-USD | SPX
SUI-USD | SUI
TAO-USD | TAO
TRUMP-USD | TRUMP
TRX-USD | TRX
UNI-USD | UNI
VVV-USD | VVV
WIF-USD | WIF
WLD-USD | WLD
WLFI-USD | WLFI
XLM-USD | XLM
XMR-USD | XMR
XPL-USD | XPL
XRP-USD | XRP
ZEC-USD | ZEC
Stocks
− 41 markets.
+ 31 markets.
Market | Symbol
AAPL-USD | AAPL
AMD-USD | AMD
AMZN-USD | AMZN
ANTHROPIC-USD | ANTHROPIC
− ARM-USD | ARM
AVGO-USD | AVGO
BABA-USD | BABA
− BE-USD | BE
BMNR-USD | BMNR
− COHR-USD | COHR
COIN-USD | COIN
CRCL-USD | CRCL
CRWV-USD | CRWV
− CXMT-USD | CXMT
− DELL-USD | DELL
DRAM-USD | DRAM
GOOGL-USD | GOOGL
HOOD-USD | HOOD
INTC-USD | INTC
− LLY-USD | LLY
META-USD | META
MRVL-USD | MRVL
MSFT-USD | MSFT
MSTR-USD | MSTR
MU-USD | MU
NBIS-USD | NBIS
NVDA-USD | NVDA
OPENAI-USD | OPENAI
ORCL-USD | ORCL
PLTR-USD | PLTR
− QCOM-USD | QCOM
− RKLB-USD | RKLB
SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG
− SKHX-USD | SKHX
SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX
− SMSN-USD | SMSN
SNDK-USD | SNDK
SPCX-USD | SPCX
TSLA-USD | TSLA
TSM-USD | TSM
WDC-USD | WDC
Indices
7 markets.
Market | Symbol
EWY-USD | EWY
JP225-USD | JP225
NAS100-USD | NAS100
QQQ-USD | QQQ
PremierMyFundedPerps · GlossarySlippage definition expanded to explain how it is calculated and displayed for triggered orders in order history.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Market order
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark.
Notional value
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.
Perpetual future
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.
Slippage
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
− execution price.
Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.
Challenges and accounts
Challenge account
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.
Consistency rule
A plan-specific limit on how concentrated qualifying profit may be in a small
number of days or results.
Equity
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.
Evaluation
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
After
Market order
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark.
Notional value
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.
Perpetual future
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.
Slippage
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
+ execution price. For a filled Stop Loss, Take Profit, or other triggered order,
+ your history shows Slippage vs trigger: the fill price compared with the
+ order's trigger price, multiplied by its size. A positive value means the fill
+ was worse than the trigger, and a negative value means it was better.
Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.
Challenges and accounts
Challenge account
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.
Consistency rule
A plan-specific limit on how concentrated qualifying profit may be in a small
number of days or results.
Equity
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.
Evaluation
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
Market order
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark.
Notional value
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.
Perpetual future
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.
Slippage
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
− execution price.
+ execution price. For a filled Stop Loss, Take Profit, or other triggered order,
+ your history shows Slippage vs trigger: the fill price compared with the
+ order's trigger price, multiplied by its size. A positive value means the fill
+ was worse than the trigger, and a negative value means it was better.
Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.
Challenges and accounts
Challenge account
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.
Consistency rule
A plan-specific limit on how concentrated qualifying profit may be in a small
number of days or results.
Equity
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.
Evaluation
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsElite pricing cards now come with 3% daily loss limit enabled by default, changeable via toggle or at checkout.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
− Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
positions.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
After
With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
+ Elite pricing cards start with 3% DLL enabled and keep that option until
+ you change it. Turn off the daily loss limit toggle on a card to choose
+ No DLL for that size. You can also choose the option at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
positions.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
− Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
+ Elite pricing cards start with 3% DLL enabled and keep that option until
+ you change it. Turn off the daily loss limit toggle on a card to choose
+ No DLL for that size. You can also choose the option at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
positions.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsAdded clarification that Elite account payout frequency displays as "On Demand" in Checkout.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
− your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
After
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
+ your previous request finishes. Checkout shows Elite payout frequency as
+ On Demand. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
− your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
+ your previous request finishes. Checkout shows Elite payout frequency as
+ On Demand. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsRemoved merch case reward for $9,999+ payouts; added Instagram submission option with tiered rewards table; added Pictionary game mode with detailed rules; Instagram stories have separate daily allowance; question page modes increased from seven to eight.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Matt's Golden Ticket, which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
− from those accounts do. A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case
− alongside its regular case.
You can submit **one funded share and one payout share per New York calendar
day**. The allowances are separate: submitting a funded share does not use your
− payout allowance. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.
After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.
Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.
Purchase History
Open Purchase History
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
- Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
After
Matt's Golden Ticket, which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
+ from those accounts do.
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
+ dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
+ keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
+ within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
+ Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
+ approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
+ can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
+ Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
+ Net payout | X case | Instagram story case
+ Up to \$250 | Bronze | Silver
+ \$250.01 to \$500 | Silver | Gold
+ \$500.01 to \$1,000 | Gold | Diamond
+ \$1,000.01 to \$2,500 | Diamond | Obsidian
+ \$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 | Obsidian | Eclipse
+ \$9,999 or more | Eclipse | Eclipse
+ A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case alongside its
+ regular case when merch rewards are available to you. An Instagram story below
+ that amount earns only the case in the table, including when that case is Eclipse.
You can submit **one funded share and one payout share per New York calendar
day**. The allowances are separate: submitting a funded share does not use your
+ payout allowance. Instagram stories have their own allowance of one submission
+ per New York calendar day. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.
After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.
Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.
Purchase History
Open Purchase History
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
+ The password opens a question page with one of eight modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
- Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
+ - Pictionary: Watch a MyFundedPerps team member draw live and type
+ guesses. The first correct guessers win.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Pictionary
+ A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
+ with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
+ watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
+ shows that it is waiting for the artist.
+ Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
+ 60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
+ Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
+ give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
+ have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
+ run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
+ one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
+ text answers, shown on the page. The page tells you right away whether a
+ guess is wrong, very close, or correct.
+ A selection of wrong guesses appears in the public Guesses list with
+ your display name. The list may omit guesses during busy periods or when a
+ player is muted. Correct and very close guess text is never shown to other
+ players. The list can show that someone guessed correctly without revealing
+ their answer. The winner count updates when rewards are confirmed, and the
+ page shows how many people are watching while the drop is live.
+ Some Pictionary drops keep guesses private. In those drops the Guesses
+ list is replaced by a note, other players never see your guesses, and you
+ see only the winner count go up as rewards are claimed. The team member
+ drawing can see every guess in both kinds of drop.
+ The first correct guesses received and accepted by the server win, up to
+ one reward per player and the number of rewards shown on the page. A correct guess shows that your place is being checked, then shows that
+ you won or that every reward was already claimed. Once you have guessed
+ correctly, further guesses do not count again. The drop ends when every
+ reward is claimed or when it is closed, and the page then shows that the drop
+ ended.
+ Sending guesses too quickly asks you to slow down for a moment before you
+ guess again. If your connection drops, the page reconnects on its own and the
+ drawing catches up. Keep the drop open in only one tab or window; opening it
+ somewhere else moves your seat there.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
Matt's Golden Ticket, which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
− from those accounts do. A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case
− alongside its regular case.
+ from those accounts do.
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
+ dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
+ keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
+ within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
+ Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
+ approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
+ can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
+ Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
+ Net payout | X case | Instagram story case
+ Up to \$250 | Bronze | Silver
+ \$250.01 to \$500 | Silver | Gold
+ \$500.01 to \$1,000 | Gold | Diamond
+ \$1,000.01 to \$2,500 | Diamond | Obsidian
+ \$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 | Obsidian | Eclipse
+ \$9,999 or more | Eclipse | Eclipse
+ A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case alongside its
+ regular case when merch rewards are available to you. An Instagram story below
+ that amount earns only the case in the table, including when that case is Eclipse.
You can submit **one funded share and one payout share per New York calendar
day**. The allowances are separate: submitting a funded share does not use your
− payout allowance. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
+ payout allowance. Instagram stories have their own allowance of one submission
+ per New York calendar day. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.
After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.
Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.
Purchase History
Open Purchase History
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
+ The password opens a question page with one of eight modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
- Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
+ - Pictionary: Watch a MyFundedPerps team member draw live and type
+ guesses. The first correct guessers win.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Pictionary
+ A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
+ with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
+ watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
+ shows that it is waiting for the artist.
+ Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
+ 60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
+ Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
+ give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
+ have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
+ run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
+ one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
+ text answers, shown on the page. The page tells you right away whether a
+ guess is wrong, very close, or correct.
+ A selection of wrong guesses appears in the public Guesses list with
+ your display name. The list may omit guesses during busy periods or when a
+ player is muted. Correct and very close guess text is never shown to other
+ players. The list can show that someone guessed correctly without revealing
+ their answer. The winner count updates when rewards are confirmed, and the
+ page shows how many people are watching while the drop is live.
+ Some Pictionary drops keep guesses private. In those drops the Guesses
+ list is replaced by a note, other players never see your guesses, and you
+ see only the winner count go up as rewards are claimed. The team member
+ drawing can see every guess in both kinds of drop.
+ The first correct guesses received and accepted by the server win, up to
+ one reward per player and the number of rewards shown on the page. A correct guess shows that your place is being checked, then shows that
+ you won or that every reward was already claimed. Once you have guessed
+ correctly, further guesses do not count again. The drop ends when every
+ reward is claimed or when it is closed, and the page then shows that the drop
+ ended.
+ Sending guesses too quickly asks you to slow down for a moment before you
+ guess again. If your connection drops, the page reconnects on its own and the
+ drawing catches up. Keep the drop open in only one tab or window; opening it
+ somewhere else moves your seat there.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramPayout method changed from Riseworks only to choice between Rise cash or Store Credit with 10% bonus, with new rules and conditions added.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
− some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
− Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
After
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Choose Rise for a cash
+ payout to the email you enter, or Store Credit (+10%) to receive your
+ commission plus a 10% boost as store credit after approval. For example,
+ \$100 in commission becomes \$110 in store credit. The dialog shows the
+ credit amount before you submit. Store credit cannot be withdrawn as cash
+ and follows the store credit expiry rules.
+ Both choices use the same identity verification, minimum, refund hold,
+ pending-request, and payout cooldown rules. Store credit does not require
+ Rise onboarding. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
− some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
− Riseworks to the email you enter. While
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Choose Rise for a cash
+ payout to the email you enter, or Store Credit (+10%) to receive your
+ commission plus a 10% boost as store credit after approval. For example,
+ \$100 in commission becomes \$110 in store credit. The dialog shows the
+ credit amount before you submit. Store credit cannot be withdrawn as cash
+ and follows the store credit expiry rules.
+ Both choices use the same identity verification, minimum, refund hold,
+ pending-request, and payout cooldown rules. Store credit does not require
+ Rise onboarding. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsThe password opens a question page with one of seven modes instead of six; Speed Trading mode was added with detailed gameplay rules and mechanics.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
back your last move or Restart to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.
On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.
The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use Retry Claim to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
After
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
+ The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
+ - Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
+ time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
back your last move or Restart to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.
On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.
The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use Retry Claim to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.
+ Speed Trading
+ A Speed Trading drop stays open for a set time shown at the top of the page,
+ and the top players by PnL when it closes win the reward. Select Start Run
+ to play. After a three second countdown, 60 seconds of a real chart from one of
+ our most traded markets plays at 100× speed, starting at a random moment in
+ the past. Prices are shown at a random scale with a little noise so the chart
+ can't be looked up, but every move is real. The market is shown during the run;
+ the date and real starting price are revealed when it ends.
+ Every run starts with a \$100,000 balance at 1× leverage, with no fees and no
+ liquidation. Trade with the buttons under the chart:
+ Control | What it does
+ Buy | Moves your position one step toward Long 100%
+ Sell | Moves your position one step toward Short 100%
+ Close | Closes your position and banks the profit or loss
+ Step | Sets the step size: 10%, 25%, 50%, or 100% (all in)
+ Each button shows the position it leads to, for example Buy 25% and
+ To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
+ keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
+ close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
+ that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
+ position closes automatically when the run ends.
+ Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
+ toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
+ uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
+ page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
+ positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
+ awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
+ temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
+ The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
+ - Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
+ time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
back your last move or Restart to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.
On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.
The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use Retry Claim to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.
+ Speed Trading
+ A Speed Trading drop stays open for a set time shown at the top of the page,
+ and the top players by PnL when it closes win the reward. Select Start Run
+ to play. After a three second countdown, 60 seconds of a real chart from one of
+ our most traded markets plays at 100× speed, starting at a random moment in
+ the past. Prices are shown at a random scale with a little noise so the chart
+ can't be looked up, but every move is real. The market is shown during the run;
+ the date and real starting price are revealed when it ends.
+ Every run starts with a \$100,000 balance at 1× leverage, with no fees and no
+ liquidation. Trade with the buttons under the chart:
+ Control | What it does
+ Buy | Moves your position one step toward Long 100%
+ Sell | Moves your position one step toward Short 100%
+ Close | Closes your position and banks the profit or loss
+ Step | Sets the step size: 10%, 25%, 50%, or 100% (all in)
+ Each button shows the position it leads to, for example Buy 25% and
+ To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
+ keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
+ close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
+ that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
+ position closes automatically when the run ends.
+ Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
+ toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
+ uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
+ page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
+ positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
+ awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
+ temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramPayout requests changed from approved on the last Friday of each month to usually approved then with some paid sooner.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
− - Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
− through Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
After
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
+ - Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
+ Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
− - Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
− through Riseworks to the email you enter. While
+ - Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
+ Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIAdded information about close notifications in the trading terminal, PnL reporting for full and partial closes, and cross-reference to PnL Display section.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
After
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
+ Close notifications in the trading terminal also cover orders placed through
+ the API. A full close reports the whole trade's settled net PnL, including
+ entry and exit fees, earlier partial closes, and swap payments. Partial-close
+ notifications distinguish a closed portion from a legacy fill-only result.
+ See PnL Display for the calculation scopes.
+ Order history continues to report each fill's own realized PnL and fee.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
+ Close notifications in the trading terminal also cover orders placed through
+ the API. A full close reports the whole trade's settled net PnL, including
+ entry and exit fees, earlier partial closes, and swap payments. Partial-close
+ notifications distinguish a closed portion from a legacy fill-only result.
+ See PnL Display for the calculation scopes.
+ Order history continues to report each fill's own realized PnL and fee.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsAdded clarification that close notifications use settled results and detailed how full and partial closes calculate net PnL in notifications.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.
Include Estimated Close Fees is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.
Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label always reads Net PnL; its value follows your
selected display mode.
These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
Setting | What it shows
Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL.
TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders.
Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position.
After
For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.
Include Estimated Close Fees is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.
Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label always reads Net PnL; its value follows your
selected display mode.
+ Close notifications use settled results rather than these display preferences.
+ A full close shows Total trade net PnL, including earlier partial closes,
+ all trading fees, and swap payments. A partial close shows **Closed portion net
+ PnL**, including its closing fee and a proportional share of the remaining
+ entry costs and swap payments. Older partially closed positions without that
+ cost history show Fill net PnL for subsequent partial closes instead.
+ Historical notifications keep their original amounts. Execution price movement
+ can still make the settled result differ from the chart estimate.
These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
Setting | What it shows
Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL.
TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders.
Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position.
For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.
Include Estimated Close Fees is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.
Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label always reads Net PnL; its value follows your
selected display mode.
+ Close notifications use settled results rather than these display preferences.
+ A full close shows Total trade net PnL, including earlier partial closes,
+ all trading fees, and swap payments. A partial close shows **Closed portion net
+ PnL**, including its closing fee and a proportional share of the remaining
+ entry costs and swap payments. Older partially closed positions without that
+ cost history show Fill net PnL for subsequent partial closes instead.
+ Historical notifications keep their original amounts. Execution price movement
+ can still make the settled result differ from the chart estimate.
These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
Setting | What it shows
Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL.
TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders.
Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Breaches and Next StepsAdded explanation that liquidated positions show total trade net PnL including partial closes, fees, and swaps, separate from account rule results.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
An evaluation changes to Failed when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.
The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:
- maximum daily loss;
- maximum drawdown;
- the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
Rule (funded accounts);
- evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
- consistency;
- profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.
Inactivity rules
Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:
Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes
Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked Failed with the reason 30-Day Inactivity Rule.
Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason 7-Day Inactivity Rule.
The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
After
An evaluation changes to Failed when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.
The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:
- maximum daily loss;
- maximum drawdown;
- the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
Rule (funded accounts);
- evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
- consistency;
- profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.
+ If a position is liquidated, its notification shows Total trade net PnL:
+ the complete position result including earlier partial closes, trading fees,
+ and swap payments. This amount describes the trade, while the account's rule
+ result depends on its recorded equity and applicable limits.
Inactivity rules
Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:
Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes
Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked Failed with the reason 30-Day Inactivity Rule.
Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason 7-Day Inactivity Rule.
The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
An evaluation changes to Failed when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.
The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:
- maximum daily loss;
- maximum drawdown;
- the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
Rule (funded accounts);
- evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
- consistency;
- profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.
+ If a position is liquidated, its notification shows Total trade net PnL:
+ the complete position result including earlier partial closes, trading fees,
+ and swap payments. This amount describes the trade, while the account's rule
+ result depends on its recorded equity and applicable limits.
Inactivity rules
Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:
Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes
Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked Failed with the reason 30-Day Inactivity Rule.
Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason 7-Day Inactivity Rule.
The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramFirst-purchase offer changed from fixed 30% off to 30% off first purchase and 25% off later purchases, with additional guidance on graphic updates.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
− your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
− current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
− only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
After
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
+ of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
+ matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
+ an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Obsidian Case
Diamond | \$2,500 | Eclipse Case
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account
Goat | \$10,000 | Matt's Golden Ticket
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
− your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
− current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
− only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
+ of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
+ matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
+ an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsClarified that Confirm New Orders does not apply to Reverse Position or One-Click Trading, removed note about reset, and added new One-Click Trading section with 6+ settings.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
Option | Behavior
Never | Submit without an additional review dialog.
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand.
− The same choice applies to
− Reverse Position: with Never,
− clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
− Orders**, it opens a short review first.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
− submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
− You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
After
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
Option | Behavior
Never | Submit without an additional review dialog.
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand.
+ This choice does not apply to
+ Reverse Position or One-Click
+ Trading. Reversals follow Confirm Reverse Position below, and One-Click
+ Trading never shows a review.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
+ submitted.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
+ Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
+ order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
+ asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
+ remove the window and its button.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
+ The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
+ orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
+ you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
+ account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
+ nothing.
+ Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
+ default. Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the
+ market's open orders in one tap. Turn it off to hide Flat from the window.
+ One-Click Trading by Market lists the markets that have their own One-Click
+ settings. For each market you can change:
+ Setting | Options
+ One-Click Size and Size Unit | USD, the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets
+ One-Click Stop Loss / Take Profit | Leave empty for none, or enter an amount above 0
+ Stop Loss and Take Profit Unit | Points, %, or USD
+ Markets are added here when you change the size in the One-Click window. Other
+ markets start from your Quick Size amount and your
+ TP/SL Preset under Order Defaults. You can save One-Click settings for up to 50
+ markets. See One-Click Trading in
+ the Trading Guide for how the window works.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
Option | Behavior
Never | Submit without an additional review dialog.
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand.
− The same choice applies to
− Reverse Position: with Never,
− clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
− Orders**, it opens a short review first.
+ This choice does not apply to
+ Reverse Position or One-Click
+ Trading. Reversals follow Confirm Reverse Position below, and One-Click
+ Trading never shows a review.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
− submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
− You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
+ submitted.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
+ Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
+ order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
+ asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
+ remove the window and its button.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
+ The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
+ orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
+ you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
+ account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
+ nothing.
+ Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
+ default. Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the
+ market's open orders in one tap. Turn it off to hide Flat from the window.
+ One-Click Trading by Market lists the markets that have their own One-Click
+ settings. For each market you can change:
+ Setting | Options
+ One-Click Size and Size Unit | USD, the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets
+ One-Click Stop Loss / Take Profit | Leave empty for none, or enter an amount above 0
+ Stop Loss and Take Profit Unit | Points, %, or USD
+ Markets are added here when you change the size in the One-Click window. Other
+ markets start from your Quick Size amount and your
+ TP/SL Preset under Order Defaults. You can save One-Click settings for up to 50
+ markets. See One-Click Trading in
+ the Trading Guide for how the window works.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Security SettingsCode expiration time changed from 10 minutes to 12 hours, or 10 minutes for email changes.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.
Remove an authenticator app
Select Remove Authenticator App in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.
If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
another device or security key as a recovery option.
Verify your identity in support chat
Support can send a Support Verification Code to your current account email.
It starts with SUP- and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
− in the email before sharing it. It expires after 10 minutes and permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.
Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.
After
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.
Remove an authenticator app
Select Remove Authenticator App in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.
If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
another device or security key as a recovery option.
Verify your identity in support chat
Support can send a Support Verification Code to your current account email.
It starts with SUP- and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
+ in the email before sharing it. It expires after 12 hours, or after 10 minutes
+ when the code is for changing your account email. Each code permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.
Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.
Remove an authenticator app
Select Remove Authenticator App in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.
If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
another device or security key as a recovery option.
Verify your identity in support chat
Support can send a Support Verification Code to your current account email.
It starts with SUP- and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
− in the email before sharing it. It expires after 10 minutes and permits five
+ in the email before sharing it. It expires after 12 hours, or after 10 minutes
+ when the code is for changing your account email. Each code permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.
Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Purchase HistoryArticle clarified that purchases paid entirely with store credit display as Card with 0.00 Card (USD) amount.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.
Review the price breakdown
Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a Quantity column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.
Payment Method shows Unifold for purchases paid through Unifold and
− Card for card checkout. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
Open an invoice
Select the invoice icon in the order row or View Invoice inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.
The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as Unifold.
Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.
Export history
Use the export control in the filtered table toolbar to download the supported
purchase-history export. Review the active filters first if you expect a
particular subset.
Total (USD) is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
Store Credit (USD), the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: Card (USD) for card checkout or
− Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. Use these columns to track how much of
− each purchase you paid out of pocket.
For a missing row or invoice, follow Troubleshooting and FAQ.
After
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.
Review the price breakdown
Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a Quantity column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.
Payment Method shows Unifold for purchases paid through Unifold and
+ Card for card checkout. A purchase paid entirely with store credit also
+ shows Card. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
Open an invoice
Select the invoice icon in the order row or View Invoice inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.
The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as Unifold.
Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.
Export history
Use the export control in the filtered table toolbar to download the supported
purchase-history export. Review the active filters first if you expect a
particular subset.
Total (USD) is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
Store Credit (USD), the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: Card (USD) for card checkout or
+ Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. A purchase paid entirely with store
+ credit shows Card with a Card (USD) amount of 0.00. Use these columns to
+ track how much of each purchase you paid out of pocket.
For a missing row or invoice, follow Troubleshooting and FAQ.
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.
Review the price breakdown
Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a Quantity column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.
Payment Method shows Unifold for purchases paid through Unifold and
− Card for card checkout. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
+ Card for card checkout. A purchase paid entirely with store credit also
+ shows Card. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
Open an invoice
Select the invoice icon in the order row or View Invoice inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.
The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as Unifold.
Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.
Export history
Use the export control in the filtered table toolbar to download the supported
purchase-history export. Review the active filters first if you expect a
particular subset.
Total (USD) is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
Store Credit (USD), the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: Card (USD) for card checkout or
− Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. Use these columns to track how much of
− each purchase you paid out of pocket.
+ Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. A purchase paid entirely with store
+ credit shows Card with a Card (USD) amount of 0.00. Use these columns to
+ track how much of each purchase you paid out of pocket.
For a missing row or invoice, follow Troubleshooting and FAQ.
PremierMyFundedPerps · SettingsArticle expanded to list specific settings options: 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, One-Click Trading, and Affiliate Emails added to descriptions.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
− Control background effects and install the web app.
Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
− Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
− Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
After
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
+ Control background effects, 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, and install
+ the web app.
Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
+ Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, One-Click Trading,
+ and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
+ Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio, and, for affiliates,
+ Affiliate Emails.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
− Control background effects and install the web app.
+ Control background effects, 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, and install
+ the web app.
Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
− Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
+ Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, One-Click Trading,
+ and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
− Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
+ Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio, and, for affiliates,
+ Affiliate Emails.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Sandbox and test keysAdded instructions for hiding sandbox accounts in the account switcher using a Filter option.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
resources return 404; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
- Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
previously successful trading-request replays.
- Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
carry a Sandbox badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
− become funded.
- Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
and account failure.
- Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.
Go live
When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.
After
never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
resources return 404; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
- Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
previously successful trading-request replays.
- Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
carry a Sandbox badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
+ become funded. To keep them out of the account switcher, open Filter
+ and check Hide Sandbox Accounts; uncheck it to show them again.
- Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
and account failure.
- Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.
Go live
When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.
never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
resources return 404; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
- Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
previously successful trading-request replays.
- Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
carry a Sandbox badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
− become funded.
+ become funded. To keep them out of the account switcher, open Filter
+ and check Hide Sandbox Accounts; uncheck it to show them again.
- Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
and account failure.
- Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.
Go live
When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PaginationArticle clarifies that cursor pagination applies to TWAP and VWAP order history endpoints and simplifies cursor position description.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination
Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.
GET /v1/orders returns newest orders first. Set limit from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.
When has_more is true, send next_cursor as the next request's cursor
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:
bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders"
-H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
--data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID"
--data-urlencode "limit=50"
--data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
− The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, and scaled
− orders. Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.
− The opaque cursor preserves the exact position in Convex's compound index, so
− orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
limit indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.
A client_order_id lookup is not paginated. Send
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and has_more: false. Do not send limit or cursor with that
lookup.
After
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination
Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.
GET /v1/orders returns newest orders first. Set limit from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.
When has_more is true, send next_cursor as the next request's cursor
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:
bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders"
-H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
--data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID"
--data-urlencode "limit=50"
--data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
+ The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, scaled
+ orders, and completed or canceled TWAP and VWAP history (GET /v1/twap-orders
+ with a status of completed or canceled). Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.
+ The opaque cursor preserves the exact sort position, so orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
limit indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.
A client_order_id lookup is not paginated. Send
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and has_more: false. Do not send limit or cursor with that
lookup.
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination
Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.
GET /v1/orders returns newest orders first. Set limit from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.
When has_more is true, send next_cursor as the next request's cursor
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:
bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders"
-H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
--data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID"
--data-urlencode "limit=50"
--data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
− The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, and scaled
− orders. Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
+ The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, scaled
+ orders, and completed or canceled TWAP and VWAP history (GET /v1/twap-orders
+ with a status of completed or canceled). Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.
− The opaque cursor preserves the exact position in Convex's compound index, so
− orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
+ The opaque cursor preserves the exact sort position, so orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
limit indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.
A client_order_id lookup is not paginated. Send
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and has_more: false. Do not send limit or cursor with that
lookup.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle adds Ostium as trading venue for SP500 and NAS100 with standard market hours, expands Hedge mode exception details, and introduces One-Click Trading feature with 4 other changes.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
− on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
Markets | Venue
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
Markets | Weekly session | Daily break
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None
− US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.
Opposite-side order size | Result
Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price.
Equal to your position | Closes the position completely.
Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip).
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
Choose an order type
Order | What it does | Main tradeoff
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
How limit orders fill
A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.
- A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
- A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
confirm this before submitting.
- A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
− Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
Start a limit order from the chart
Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.
Forex markets use the same rules with the forex slippage tier as the cap. The
tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits retain their
price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.
Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.
− The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price (fixed per-side spread for FX, maximum adverse slippage for other markets):
Major indices and commodities (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)
Order notional | Maximum slippage
Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps
Up to \$200,000 | 0.5 bps
Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.75 bps
Above \$1,000,000 | 1.00 bps
Forex
Order notional | Maximum slippage
Up to \$100,000 | 0.05 bps
Up to \$200,000 | 0.08 bps
Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.12 bps
Above \$1,000,000 | 0.15 bps
A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
execution.
Use execution protection
The Trading settings include:
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
+ on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
+ trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
+ Markets with two trading-hour options.
+ The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
Markets | Venue
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
Markets | Weekly session | Daily break
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None
+ US30, and SP500 and NAS100 on Ostium where offered | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
+ While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
+ lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.
Opposite-side order size | Result
Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price.
Equal to your position | Closes the position completely.
Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip).
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
+ One exception comes from the retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets.
+ A position you still hold there is separate from the Veranta market of the same
+ name, so a new EUR/USD or USD/JPY order opens or changes a Veranta position
+ and does not reduce the Hyperliquid one. See Retiring markets.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
+ It is on by default in
+ Trading settings; turn it off there to
+ remove the window.
+ - On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
+ window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
+ size are remembered in that browser.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
+ over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
+ to the other edge.
+ The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
+ between them, and Flat below.
+ - Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
+ tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
+ Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
+ - A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
+ position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
+ opposite order reduces the position.
+ - Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
+ open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
+ the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
+ you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
+ Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
+ Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
+ amount and your TP/SL preset.
+ Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
+ confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
Choose an order type
Order | What it does | Main tradeoff
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
+ Triggers on Veranta and Ostium markets | Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other price triggers follow the venue's mid price. | The fill still uses the bid or ask, so it can differ from the mid price that triggered it.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
How limit orders fill
A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.
- A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
- A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
confirm this before submitting.
- A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
+ A fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
Start a limit order from the chart
Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.
Forex markets use the same rules with the forex slippage tier as the cap. The
tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits retain their
price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.
Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.
+ The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price. Each value is the maximum adverse slippage, a worst-case cap rather than a fixed spread, including for Forex:
Major indices and commodities (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)
Order notional | Maximum slippage
Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps
Up to \$200,000 | 0.5 bps
Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.75 bps
Above \$1,000,000 | 1.00 bps
Forex
Order notional | Maximum slippage
Up to \$100,000 | 0.05 bps
Up to \$200,000 | 0.08 bps
Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.12 bps
Above \$1,000,000 | 0.15 bps
A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
execution.
Use execution protection
The Trading settings include:
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
+ - One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
+ line without the close dialog;
+ - Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
+ Reverse Position button and its review;
+ - One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
+ and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
− on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The following markets price from oracle
+ on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
+ trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
+ Markets with two trading-hour options.
+ The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
Markets | Venue
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
Markets | Weekly session | Daily break
EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None
− US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
+ US30, and SP500 and NAS100 on Ostium where offered | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
+ While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
+ lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.
Opposite-side order size | Result
Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price.
Equal to your position | Closes the position completely.
Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip).
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
+ One exception comes from the retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets.
+ A position you still hold there is separate from the Veranta market of the same
+ name, so a new EUR/USD or USD/JPY order opens or changes a Veranta position
+ and does not reduce the Hyperliquid one. See Retiring markets.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
+ It is on by default in
+ Trading settings; turn it off there to
+ remove the window.
+ - On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
+ window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
+ size are remembered in that browser.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
+ over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
+ to the other edge.
+ The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
+ between them, and Flat below.
+ - Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
+ tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
+ Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
+ - A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
+ position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
+ opposite order reduces the position.
+ - Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
+ open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
+ the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
+ you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
+ Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
+ Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
+ amount and your TP/SL preset.
+ Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
+ confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
Choose an order type
Order | What it does | Main tradeoff
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
+ Triggers on Veranta and Ostium markets | Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other price triggers follow the venue's mid price. | The fill still uses the bid or ask, so it can differ from the mid price that triggered it.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
How limit orders fill
A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.
- A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
- A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
confirm this before submitting.
- A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
− Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
+ A fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
Start a limit order from the chart
Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.
Forex markets use the same rules with the forex slippage tier as the cap. The
tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits retain their
price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.
Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.
− The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price (fixed per-side spread for FX, maximum adverse slippage for other markets):
+ The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price. Each value is the maximum adverse slippage, a worst-case cap rather than a fixed spread, including for Forex:
Major indices and commodities (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)
Order notional | Maximum slippage
Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps
Up to \$200,000 | 0.5 bps
Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.75 bps
Above \$1,000,000 | 1.00 bps
Forex
Order notional | Maximum slippage
Up to \$100,000 | 0.05 bps
Up to \$200,000 | 0.08 bps
Up to \$1,000,000 | 0.12 bps
Above \$1,000,000 | 0.15 bps
A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
execution.
Use execution protection
The Trading settings include:
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
+ - One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
+ line without the close dialog;
+ - Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
+ Reverse Position button and its review;
+ - One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
+ and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · October competitionAdded schedule showing registration opens October 1 and trading opens October 5 and closes October 31, 2026; added information about free Trade Case entry task and automatic entry conditions.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition
Entry, account paths, ranking, and the free reset and its unlock tasks for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.
Entry
The October Competition has its own page under Competitions, with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.
When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says You're in the October Competition and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.
Choose your path
Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.
Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps
Blitz | \$50,000 | 4x the standard caps
Classic | \$100,000 | Standard caps
Whale | \$150,000 | Half (0.5x the standard caps)
Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
After
October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition
Entry, account paths, ranking, and the free reset and its unlock tasks for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.
+ Schedule
+ All times are New York time.
+ Event | Time
+ Registration opens | October 1, 2026 at 12:00 AM
+ Trading opens | October 5, 2026 at 12:00 PM
+ Registration and trading close | October 31, 2026 at 12:00 PM
+ You can join until trading closes. Joining late leaves less time to trade, and
+ no adjustment is made. The competition page shows these times in your own time
+ zone.
Entry
The October Competition has its own page under Competitions, with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.
+ The free Trade Case task list for following MyFundedPerps on X also shows an
+ optional Enter Competition step while registration is open. Entry is free
+ and does not affect your Trade Case.
When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says You're in the October Competition and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.
Choose your path
Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.
Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps
Blitz | \$50,000 | 4x the standard caps
Classic | \$100,000 | Standard caps
Whale | \$150,000 | Half (0.5x the standard caps)
Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition
Entry, account paths, ranking, and the free reset and its unlock tasks for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.
+ Schedule
+ All times are New York time.
+ Event | Time
+ Registration opens | October 1, 2026 at 12:00 AM
+ Trading opens | October 5, 2026 at 12:00 PM
+ Registration and trading close | October 31, 2026 at 12:00 PM
+ You can join until trading closes. Joining late leaves less time to trade, and
+ no adjustment is made. The competition page shows these times in your own time
+ zone.
Entry
The October Competition has its own page under Competitions, with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.
+ The free Trade Case task list for following MyFundedPerps on X also shows an
+ optional Enter Competition step while registration is open. Entry is free
+ and does not affect your Trade Case.
When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says You're in the October Competition and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.
Choose your path
Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.
Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps
Blitz | \$50,000 | 4x the standard caps
Classic | \$100,000 | Standard caps
Whale | \$150,000 | Half (0.5x the standard caps)
Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
PremierMyFundedPerps · GuidesAdded nine sections covering markets by asset class, custom chart indicators, closed trade review, competitions, and affiliate program details.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
− Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
After
Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
+ See every market you can trade, grouped by asset class.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
+ Write your own chart indicators with adjustable inputs.
+ Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
+ Review closed trades and add notes, setups, tags, and ratings.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
+ Find current, upcoming, and past competitions and how standings work.
+ Entry, rules, prizes, and daily case drops for the Launch Competition.
+ Schedule, account paths, ranking, and the free reset for the October
+ Competition.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
+ Apply, share your code, earn commission and tier rewards, and get paid.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
+ See every market you can trade, grouped by asset class.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
− Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
+ Write your own chart indicators with adjustable inputs.
+ Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
+ Review closed trades and add notes, setups, tags, and ratings.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
+ Find current, upcoming, and past competitions and how standings work.
+ Entry, rules, prizes, and daily case drops for the Launch Competition.
+ Schedule, account paths, ranking, and the free reset for the October
+ Competition.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
+ Apply, share your code, earn commission and tier rewards, and get paid.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded NAS100 and SP500 to the list of instruments with boosted leverage on Elite accounts.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesAdded information about hiding API sandbox accounts using a similar method to hiding competition accounts.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared.
Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account.
Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow.
Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active.
After an evaluation passes
The account switcher's Active filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows Passed and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the Passed
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.
A competition account counts as Active while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open Filter and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
− option to show it again.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
After
Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared.
Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account.
Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow.
Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active.
After an evaluation passes
The account switcher's Active filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows Passed and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the Passed
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.
A competition account counts as Active while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open Filter and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
+ option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
+ Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared.
Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account.
Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow.
Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active.
After an evaluation passes
The account switcher's Active filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows Passed and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the Passed
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.
A competition account counts as Active while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open Filter and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
− option to show it again.
+ option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
+ Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsAdded guidance on contacting support for mistaken store-credit selection, and clarified that payout review can be automatic or staff-conducted with frequency affecting timing.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.
On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 10% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$110 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
Store Credit Expiry.
The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.
Submit and wait for review
Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
− Other payout requests go through review. While a request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.
Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action.
Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.
After
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.
On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 10% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$110 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
Store Credit Expiry.
The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.
+ If you chose store credit by mistake, contact support before spending any of
+ that credit.
Submit and wait for review
Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
+ Other payout requests go through review. Requests may be reviewed
+ automatically or by staff. Frequent requests can take longer to review. While a
+ request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.
Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action.
Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.
On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 10% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$110 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
Store Credit Expiry.
The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.
+ If you chose store credit by mistake, contact support before spending any of
+ that credit.
Submit and wait for review
Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
− Other payout requests go through review. While a request is under review,
+ Other payout requests go through review. Requests may be reviewed
+ automatically or by staff. Frequent requests can take longer to review. While a
+ request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.
Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action.
Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Buying a ChallengeAffiliate @CODE links now apply automatically at checkout instead of taking priority over referral cookies, and PERPS no longer applies automatically without explicit entry.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
− show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
− - the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts control appears under Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:
Account size | Accounts per order
\$5K (Elite) | Up to 10
The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
Reserved Store Credit. Resume Payment opens that invoice again.
Check Status retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.
Use Cancel Invoice to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
− Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
− any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
− even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
− before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
− referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
− Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
− Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
− discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
After
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
+ show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link is applied automatically at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. PERPS is not applied automatically: to use it or any other code, enter it and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
+ - the daily payout window (Elite has none) and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts control appears under Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:
Account size | Accounts per order
\$5K (Elite) | Up to 10
The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
Reserved Store Credit. Resume Payment opens that invoice again.
Check Status retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.
Use Cancel Invoice to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
+ Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of any older
+ referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in even when
+ attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code before
+ applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active referral
+ cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it. Otherwise,
+ checkout starts without a code; PERPS is shown on the account-size cards
+ but applies only when you enter it.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
+ Use Add Code to enter a discount or affiliate code, or to replace an
+ automatically applied affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
− show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
+ show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link is applied automatically at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. PERPS is not applied automatically: to use it or any other code, enter it and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
− - the daily payout window and gross minimum;
+ - the daily payout window (Elite has none) and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts control appears under Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:
Account size | Accounts per order
\$5K (Elite) | Up to 10
The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
Reserved Store Credit. Resume Payment opens that invoice again.
Check Status retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.
Use Cancel Invoice to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
− Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
− any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
− even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
− before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
− referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
− Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
+ Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of any older
+ referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in even when
+ attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code before
+ applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active referral
+ cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it. Otherwise,
+ checkout starts without a code; PERPS is shown on the account-size cards
+ but applies only when you enter it.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
− Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
− discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
+ Use Add Code to enter a discount or affiliate code, or to replace an
+ automatically applied affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
